diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex')
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls | 4580 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty | 1754 |
2 files changed, 6334 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..835c69bd29d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls @@ -0,0 +1,4580 @@ +%% +%% IEEEtran.cls 2005/09/13 version V1.6c +%% +%% NOTE: This text file uses UNIX line feed conventions. When (human) +%% reading this file on other platforms, you may have to use a text +%% editor that can handle lines terminated by the UNIX line feed +%% character (0x0A). +%% +%% +%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of +%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and +%% conferences. +%% +%% The latest version and documentation of IEEEtran can be obtained at: +%% http://www.ieee.org +%% and/or +%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ +%% +%% The CTAN page may have additional files related to obscure, +%% non-IEEE standard and/or platform dependent use of this tool. +%% +%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes +%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. +%% +%% +%% Contributors: +%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), +%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), +%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2005) +%% +%% +%% Copyright (c) 1993-2005 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, +%% Jon Dixion, Peter N"uchter, +%% Juergen von Hagen and Michael Shell +%% +%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.6): Michael Shell +%% mshell@ece.gatech.edu +%% See the CTAN website above +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command +%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. +%% +%%********************************************************************** +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either +%% expressed or implied; without even the implied warranty of +%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code +%% be liable for any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, +%% incidental, consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the +%% use or misuse of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This code is distributed under the Perl Artistic License +%% ( http://language.perl.com/misc/Artistic.html ) +%% and may be freely used, distributed and modified. +%% Retain the contribution notices and credits. +%% +%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an +%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will +%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. +%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version +%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". +%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, +%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the +%% correct version information. +%% The changes should also be documented via source comments. +%%********************************************************************** +%% +% +% Available class options +% (e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} +% +% *** choose only one from each category *** +% +% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt +% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. +% +% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca +% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, +% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user +% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like +% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for +% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is +% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review +% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will +% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the +% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are +% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like +% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted +% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact +% information can be easily seen on the cover page. +% The default is journal. +% +% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final +% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for +% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. +% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX +% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows +% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like +% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot +% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably +% also want to select onecolumn. +% The default is final. +% +% letterpaper, a4paper +% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER +% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS +% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will +% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer +% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top +% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. +% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) +% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing +% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. +% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. +% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex +% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more +% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for +% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the +% testflow documentation +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/IEEEtran/testflow +% for more details on dvips paper size configuration. +% The default is letterpaper. +% +% oneside, twoside +% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) +% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of +% the pages. +% The default is oneside. +% +% onecolumn, twocolumn +% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One +% column mode is usually used only with draft papers. +% The default is twocolumn. +% +% nofonttune +% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those +% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" +% their fonts. +% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. +% +% +%******* +% 09/2005 V1.6c (MDS) changes: +% +% 1) Changed endfigure/endfloat definitions so as not to cause problems with +% preview-LaTeX and other packages. Thanks to Stephan Heuel and David +% Kastrup for reporting this problem. +% +% +%******* +% 11/2002 V1.6b (MDS) changes: +% +% 1) Fixed problem with figure captions when using hyperref. Thanks to +% Leandro Barajas and Michael Bassetti for reporting this bug. +% +% 2) Provide a fake nabib command \NAT@parse so that hyperref will not +% interfere with the operation of cite.sty. However, as a result citation +% numbers will not be hyperlinked. Also, natbib will not be able to work +% with IEEEtran. However, this is perhaps the best solution until cite.sty +% and hyperref.sty are able to co-exist with each other. +% It easy enough to override the fake command via: +% \makeatletter +% \let\NAT@parse\undefined +% \makeatother +% +% 3) Revised font selection method so as not to have problems when used +% with setspace.sty. Thanks to Zhang Yan for reporting this bug. +% +% 4) Added \special to feed papersize to dvips. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann +% for suggesting this feature. +% +% 5) In addition to the IEEE IED lists, the original IED style list +% environments (as is done in article.cls) are now provided as +% LaTeXitemize, LaTeXenumerate, and LaTeXdescription. Also, users can +% now redefine \makelabel within IEEE IED list controls. There may be +% some use for this in specialized applications. Thanks to Eli Barzilay +% for suggesting this feature. +% +% 6) \table* now defaults to \footnotesize text like \table. +% +% 7) The draft modes now no longer force a pagebreak after the title. +% Thanks to Christian Peel for suggesting this change. +% +% 8) New draftclsnofoot mode is like draftcls, but does not display the +% date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot of the page. Thanks to +% Christian Peel for suggesting this feature. +% +% 9) New peerreview and peerreviewca modes with \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle +% command allows for a "cover" titlepage for anonymous peer review. +% Except for the cover titlepage, peerreview is much like journal mode. +% peerreviewca is like peerreview, but allows the author names to be +% entered and formatted as under conference mode so that author +% affiliations and contact information can be easily seen on the cover +% page. Thanks to Eric Benedict for suggesting this feature. +% +% +%******* +% 7/2002 V1.6 (MDS) changes: +% +% 1) Added conference mode via conference option. Defaults to the traditional +% journal mode. i.e., \documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran} +% +% 2) Added support for A4 paper via new a4paper option. Pdflatex's paper size +% lengths are now automatically set to the proper paper size being used. +% +% 3) Revised margins again. Page text is now horizontally centered. +% Conference mode increases the top and bottom margins with the bottom +% margin being slightly larger. For A4 paper, the top margin and text +% typesetting will not change from those of US letter paper, but the side +% margins will be smaller and the bottom margin will be larger than that of +% US letter. All per IEEE specs. +% +% 4) Fixed footnote line spacing anomaly in draft mode. +% Thanks to Alberto Rodriguez for reporting this bug. +% +% Also, slightly revised footnote and \thanks note spacing. +% Set \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 to prevent LaTeX +% from breaking footnotes across multiple pages or columns. +% +% 5) Fixed bug that caused overwritten photo areas and sometimes anomalous +% spacing when a new paragraph was started within a biography. Also, +% the presence of \par's, new lines or spaces at the beginning of +% abstract, keywords, biography, or biographynophoto will no longer +% affect the first word spacing. +% Thanks to Eric Durant for reporting this bug. +% +% The biography environment now does a better job in preventing +% a biography photo area from being broken across pages or columns. +% +% 6) Fixed whitespace between \cite entries bug. i.e., +% both \cite{einstein24, knuth84} and \cite{einstein24,knuth84} +% are now valid. \cite is now a robust command as it should be. +% IEEEtran now no longer defines the old non-standard \shortcite or +% \citename. +% +% The base IEEEtran.cls does not sort citation numbers or produce ranges +% for three or more consecutive numbers. However, V1.6 of IEEEtran.cls +% now pre-defines the following format control macros to facilitate easy +% use with Donald Arseneau's cite.sty package (tested with cite.sty V3.9): +% +% \def\citepunct{], [} +% \def\citedash{]--[} +% +% cite.sty is standard on most LaTeX sytems and can be obtained from +% www.ctan.org. Thanks to Donald Arseneau for creating cite.sty, providing +% the required format arguments to produce the IEEE style. and +% designing a cite interface capable of handling the IEEE citation +% style. +% +% Note: Historically, IEEE has wanted authors to "hardcode" symbolics. +% (i.e., replace all \cite{} with fixed [x]). However, it now seems that +% most electronic manuscript submissions to IEEE are in .pdf format, and +% as such, do not require the LaTeX document reference numbers to be hard +% coded. If an author is required to submit actual LaTeX files, I do +% recommend that the bibliography file (.bbl) be copied into the .tex +% document and the \bibliographystyle{} and \bibliography{} commands be +% commented out so that the .tex file does not depend on (potentially +% lengthy and/or confidential) external bibliography database files. +% +% 7) Adjusted some spacing parameters. The spacing above and below equations +% has been revised (to a typical IEEE value). \jot now has a decent value. +% The title text is now exactly 24pt. (On a related note, \fontsubfuzz has +% been increased to 0.9pt to prevent annoying font substitution warnings +% when using the Computer Modern fonts that use the 24.88pt size.) +% In V1.6, \small is now 8.5pt in 9pt docs because \footnotesize is 8pt. +% For 9pt docs, you should probably go ahead and use \footnotesize when you +% need text a little smaller than \normalsize. +% The interword spacing has been adjusted to be extremely close to that +% which IEEE uses. You can use a new class option, nofonttune, if you need +% to disable the adjusting of the interword spacing. This adjustment and +% an increase to \hyphenpenalty have greatly reduced the amount of +% hyphenation in a typical paper. +% The baselineskip for the normalsize fonts has been tweaked to reduce +% underfull vboxes on journal paper columns with only paragraphs. +% Conference mode does the same thing but by also tweaking the \textheight +% slightly off 9.25in (IEEE spec) to ensure an integer number of lines per +% page. Draft (also draftcls) mode has also been revised to reduce +% underfull vbox warnings. However, draft mode can still produce underfull +% vboxes (a direct result of the increase in line spacing and margins) if: +% A non-normalsize font occupies an entire column (abstract and index terms +% take up a whole column by themselves); or the beginning of a section +% occurs near the end of a column and cannot be squeezed into the bottom, +% etc. This is normal as draft mode's liberal spacings cannot guarantee +% perfect formatting. +% +% 8) New biographynophoto environment for biographies without photos. +% Usage: +% +% \begin{biographynophoto}{author name} +% biography text here +% \end{biographynophoto} +% +% 9) Fixed bug that produced multiple table of contents entries for papers +% with more than one biography. Also, biography now works better with +% hyperref. +% +%10) New \sublargesize font size command provides for 11pt text in a 10pt +% document. (Needed for things like author names.) For documents not +% using 10pt normal size text, \sublargesize is currently identical +% to \large. +% +%11) New \IEEEmembership command to provide correct font to indicate IEEE +% membership for journal papers. +% +%12) Fixed author name line overflow problem when in journal mode. This +% problem had been introduced in V1.5 in my rush to get \and to work for +% conferences. \and is unneeded (and invalid) in journal mode. For +% conference mode, \and will work as expected and features an optional +% spacing argument. i.e., \and[\hspace{5ex}] +% \and will default (recommended) to using \hfill which will result in +% equal spacing between author blocks. +% +%13) New \authorblockN, \authorblockA and \authorrefmark commands to +% facilitate easy formatting of author names, affiliations and cross +% reference symbols, respectively, when in conference mode. These +% three commands are to be used only for conference papers. +% In conference mode, \author text is placed within a modified tabular +% environment (somewhat like article.cls). So, within \author in conference +% mode, you should not try to enclose multiple \\ within an environment or +% command (other than the argument braces of \authorblockX{}). For example: +% +% \author{\authorblockN{{John Doe \\ Jane Doe}}} % WRONG! +% +% will generate an error. +% +% Note that font size/attribute changes will now persists across \\ within +% \author. (But, not across author blocks nor across \and.) +% However, with the new commands, there should be no need to alter any +% font attributes within \author. All text sizing and spacing within +% \author{} and the author block commands is per IEEE specs for both +% conference and journal modes. (In conference mode, the author names +% are only very slightly larger than the affiliations which are in normal +% size.) For specialized applications you can alter the justification of +% author lines by placing \hfill at the beginning or at the end of a line. +% The interline spacing within \author is determined by the font attributes +% that are in effect at the end of each line within author. +% +%14) Because the titles and author name blocks use different font sizes/styles +% from the main text, it was possible that two column papers with titles that +% span both columns (standard journal and conference papers, but not technotes) +% with certain numbers of lines for the title and authors' name/affiliations +% can cause underfull vbox problems (paragraphs with large spacings between +% them) in the second column of the main text on the title page - if there were +% no new sections, equations or figures in this column (they would provide some +% needed rubber spacing). The use of things like special paper notices and +% publisher ID marks also affected this issue. The problem could not happen +% in the first column because the first column has a rubber length around the +% heading of the first section. Furthermore, problems seldom occurred on pages +% after the first as the margins had been chosen not to cause it with the popular +% font sizes. Rubber lengths after the author names would not fix this problem. +% Auto-calculating a "good" spacing after the title is a tad difficult +% to do in LaTeX. However, I am pleased to report that V1.6 has this new +% capability - "dynamically determined title spacing". IEEEtran will now +% measure the height of all the title and author text in \maketitle +% and then calculate a rigid (non-rubber) spacer to follow that meets +% IEEE specs and also produces a \textheight on the title page that ensures +% an integer number of normalsized lines on the rest of the page. Single +% column papers, and two column papers with the title entirely in column +% one (technotes) do not need dynamic rigid spacing and therefore use +% standard rubber spacers. +% +% Note: This problem can still crop up if you use floats that span both +% columns (i.e., figure*). It has been a decade+ long limitation with LaTeX +% that the stretchable portion of \dbltextfloatsep is ignored. +% If you get a problem with underful vbox warnings and paragraphs that "are +% pulled apart" on page with a float that spans both columns, tweak the +% space between the figure and the main text a little: +% +% \vskip 5pt +% \end{figure*} +% +% If you can't find a value that fixes both columns, you are going to +% have to put a rubber spacer somewhere in one or both of the columns. +% +%15) Because of change #14 above, those of you using \pubid will, as of V1.6, +% have to place it *before* \maketitle in order for it have the intended +% affect. The dynamic spacer algorithm must see if you are using \pubid when +% \maketitle is called. \pubidadjcol works as before except that it now +% has additional logic to prevent it from doing anything if \pubid was never +% called. +% +%16) In some unusual, non-standard circumstances, an author may desire to +% alter the spacing after the title area or put some unusual text above +% the main text. For instance, to stop a bad break when a new section +% occurs right at the start of the second page. This is difficult to do +% when the title spans both columns of two column text since LaTeX treats +% such title text as a type of float. A new command, \IEEEaftertitletext{}, +% gives access to the end of that produced by \maketitle. The types of +% things that can go into \IEEEaftertitletext are the same as those into +% \twocolumn[] - no \par, but \\ are OK. There is no restriction on the +% range of spacings that can be used. +% i.e., \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-100pt}} will push the main text well +% into the title and \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{100pt}} will push it far down +% the page. You will have complete control. If used, place +% \IEEEaftertitletext{} before \maketitle like \title and \author. IEEEtran's +% dynamic title spacing intentionally does not take into consideration the +% contents of \IEEEaftertitletext{} when determining the spacer after the title +% area (otherwise it would try to second guess you), so the user will have +% manually adjust the height of the contents in \IEEEaftertitletext{} if the +% problem discussed in #14 above should develop. A safe bet is to keep +% the height of contents of \IEEEaftertitletext{} to integer multiples of +% \baselineskip, i.e., \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-1\baselineskip}} +% +% Because it can result in an IEEE nonstandard format, the use of +% \IEEEaftertitletext{} is discouraged. Possible uses include (1) the use of +% IEEEtran for non-IEEE work with different title spacing requirements, +% or (2) as an emergency manual override if a problem should develop in +% IEEEtran's automatic spacing algorithm. +% +%17) completely rewritten \PARstart to: +% a. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment +% within the paragraph that uses \PARstart. +% b. auto-detect and use the current font family +% c. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that +% interword glue will now work as normal. +% d. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. +% +% Because the current font family is now auto-detected, there is no +% longer any need for \CMPARstart - it is now the same as \PARstart. +% +%18) There is now a new "open box" Q.E.D. symbol (\QEDopen) as well as the +% original default (\QED) closed one (\QEDclosed). Some journals use +% the open form. To make \proof use the open form, just do: +% \renewcommand{\QED}{\QEDopen} +% +%19) Additional \typeout{} notices added to warn the user when unusual +% settings/commands are detected or as reminders to avoid common errors +% when in conference mode. +% +%20) IEEEtran now provides \abovecaptionskip and \belowcaptionskip skip +% registers because article class provides them and some packages +% may error if they are missing. However, IEEEtran only uses +% \abovecaptionskip for actual caption spacing. +% +%21) Fixed bug that prevented users from redefining the section headings +% to use arabic digits. Thanks to Richardt H. Wilkinson for reporting +% this bug. +% +%22) Code cleaned up to be more efficient with the use of TeX registers; +% removed some old LaTeX 2.09 code; revised option processing to +% LaTeX2e standard; eliminated unwanted "phantom" spaces in some +% environments. +% +%23) Added new \IEEEeqnarray, \IEEEeqnarraybox, \IEEEeqnarrayboxm and +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt environments to provide superior alternatives to the +% standard LaTeX \eqnarray, \array and \tabular. Additional new support +% commands include \IEEEeqnarraydecl, \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl, +% \IEEEeqnarraymathstyle, \IEEEeqnarraytextstyle, \yesnumber. \IEEEnonumber, +% \IEEEyesnumber, \IEEEyessubnumber, \IEEEeqnarraynumspace, \IEEEeqnarraymulticol, +% \IEEEeqnarrayomit, \IEEEeqnarraydefcol, \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep, \IEEEeqnarrayseprow, +% \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut, \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow, \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut, +% \IEEEeqnarraystrutmode, \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize, \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd, +% \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse and \IEEEstrut. +% These are documented in the user's guide. +% +%24) V1.6 changed back to using () around theorem names (which are also now in italics) +% as this is what IEEE is using now. Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. +% Also, when section numbers are used as the first part of theorem numbers, display +% them in arabic, not Roman. +% +%25) New \IEEEtriggeratref{X} command allows a page break to be triggered just +% before the given reference number "X". This is most useful when balancing +% the columns on the last page and a \newpage between references is desired. +% \IEEEtriggercmd{X} allows a different command to be executed at trigger. +% +% +%******* +% 7/2001 V1.5 (MDS) changes: +% +% +% 1) Fixed \and within \author bug: (! Misplaced \crcr. \endtabular ->\crcr) +% Thanks to Rainer Dorsch for discovering and reporting that \and +% did not work. +% +% 2) Fixed the biography environment so that if a biography's text is shorter +% than the area allocated for the photo, a collision with the next +% biography does not occur. You can now put real graphics (using the +% graphicx package) into the biography photo box with a new optional +% argument of the biography command! For example: +% +% \begin{biography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{./tux.eps}}]{Linux Penguin} +% +% will use the specified graphic as the author's photo. The photo area is +% exactly 1in wide by 1.25in high - as is done in IEEE Transactions. Try +% to keep the same 4:5 aspect ratio if scanning/cropping your photos. +% Note the need for the extra set of enclosing braces around the +% \includegraphics. Without it, The LaTeX parser may get confused when it +% sees the \includegraphics's brackets within the biography's optional +% argument. Due to the length of the \includegraphics command, you may wish +% to define your own shorthand form of it. I have not done so with IEEEtran +% to prevent dependence on the graphicx package. If you do not use the +% optional argument, or leave it empty, a standard frame box with the +% words "Place Photo Here" will be used. If you want the space to remain +% completely empty, you can do: +% +% \begin{biography}[\mbox{}]{The Invisible Man} +% +% The interface to biography's optional argument is into a +% 1in X 1.25in minipage in which the argument text is centered both +% horizontally and vertically: +% +% \begin{minipage}[b][1.25in][c]{1in}% +% \centering +% #1% +% \end{minipage} +% +% Within the biography environment, \unitlength is set to 1in. +% With this in mind, you can even design your own custom frameboxes. +% For instance: +% +% \begin{biography}[\framebox(1,1.25){\parbox[][\height][c]{0.9in}{\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE}}]{Author Name} +% +% will yield the same type of result as the default photo box. +% +% Thanks to Herbert Voss for discovering the collision bug, suggesting the ability +% to handle graphics and providing some prototype code. +% +% +% +%******* +% 3/2001 V1.4 (MDS) changes: +% +% +% 1) New "draftcls" and "final" options have been added. +% Thanks to Dragan Cvetkovic for suggesting an option like draftcls. +% +% 2) Documentation changes to reflect the fact that this IEEEtran.cls +% is no longer beta test. +% +% 3) Slightly revised caption sizes. Figure and table captions are now +% in \footnotesize, not \small as before. +% +% 4) Allow user to control figure caption justification. IEEEtran.cls +% normally defaults to left justified as is done in Transactions. +% However, for conferences, you may wish to issue the command: +% \centerfigcaptionstrue +% in the preamble. Short (less than one line long) figure captions +% will then be centered. Multi-line figure captions will always be +% properly left justified. V1.6: This is already done for you when +% using the conference mode. +% +% +% +%******* +% 1/2001 V1.3 +% Michael Shell (MDS) made extensive changes and additions: +% +% +% BUGS FIXED (and many others too numerous to mention!): +% 1) Fixed improper alignment with itemized, enumerated and +% description lists. Added new controls to these three +% environments so that it is easy to get the alignment IEEE +% uses. Furthermore, the itemize, enumerate and description lists +% no longer force a new paragraph to begin at the end the list +% (\par). (Sometimes lists are used within paragraphs.) +% +% 2) JVH's fixes now allow things like $\mathbf{N}(0,P(0))$ +% to work properly without needing the extra braces: +% ${\mathbf{N}}(0,P(0))$. There is no longer any dependence +% on the "rawfonts" and "oldlfont" packages. Thanks Juergen! +% +% 3) Fixed underfull hbox errors and incorrect reference number +% alignment when the number of references in the bibliography +% exceeded 9 entries (which is almost every paper!). +% +% 4) Removed dependence on the LaTeX sizexx.clo files. +% Now, 9pt documents should work correctly even on systems that +% lack a size9.clo file. This is most often used in conjunction +% with the option "technote" for "correspondence" papers like those +% in IEEE Transactions on Information Theory. For virtually all +% other papers, 10pt is used and so it is the default. +% Some improper font sizes have been corrected. \footnotesize is +% now 8pt in 9pt docs, so footnotes in technotes should be the +% correct size now. +% +% 5) Added \interlinepenalty within the bibliography section to discourage +% LaTeX from breaking within a reference. IEEE almost never breaks within +% a reference and when they do it is usually in technotes +% (correspondence papers). You may get an underfull vbox warning in the +% bibliography indicating that the spacing just before the "REFERENCES" +% section is larger than normal, but the final result will be more like +% what IEEE will publish. See the comments in the BIBLIOGRAPHY section +% around line 2034 below if you want to change this behavior. +% +% 6) No longer "blows up" when you use \paragraph and have a table +% of contents. +% +% 7) Theorem environment changed, (but for V1.6, back to the old way, sigh). +% +% 8) Figure captions adjusted: IEEE left (not center) justifies +% figure captions (for journals) and does not indent figure caption text. +% +% 9) Adjusted some spacings in the table of contents(TOC))/list-of-figures/ +% list-of-tables so that section/table numbers will not so easily +% collide with the titles. Section VIII was usually the worst offender. +% Still doesn't right justify the section numbers, but neither does +% article.cls (This must be why LaTeX likes the x.y.z section numbering +% scheme unlike I, II, III, etc. of IEEE. ) +% It may be "normal" as it is (left justified). sigh. +% +%10) Now uses "index terms" now as a heading instead of "keywords". +% Furthermore, the "index terms" and "abstract" headings are in bold +% italic. This is how IEEE does things. +% +%11) \thebibliography and \biography now put entries into +% the table of contents for you. +% +% ******* +% +% +% +% +% +% ******* +% 9/2000 (JVH) changes: (now designated as V1.2) +% +% made some corrections to get closer to LaTeX2e +% 20000906 Juergen v.Hagen +% vonhagen@ihefiji.etec.uni-karlsruhe.de +% +% Permission to redistribute granted as of December 2000. +% ******* +% +% +% +% +% +% ******* +% +% 1996 (JWD) LaTeX2e version: (now designated as V1.1) +% +% In the most recent TeXhax digest, there was a request for a copy of +% IEEEtrans.sty modified to work with LaTeX2e. I have a version I +% modified to make it IEEEtrans.cls, which I have sent to the person +% making the request and am now sending to you to consider posting to +% the archives. +% -- +% Jon Dixon +% dixonj@colorado.edu +% http://spot.colorado.edu/~dixonj/ +% +%******* +% +% +% +% +% +%******* +% +% 30-August-1993 original LaTeX 2.09 version (IEEEtran.sty), +% (now designated as V1.0): +% +% by Gerry Murray and Silvano Balemi +% Automatic Control Lab, ETH Zurich, Switzerland +% balemi@aut.ee.ethz.ch +% +%******* +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% +% +% +% +\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2005/09/13 revision V1.6c by Michael Shell] +\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} +\typeout{-- The source comments contain changelog notes.} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + +% define new needed flags to indicate document options +% and set a few "failsafe" defaults +\newif\if@twocolumnmode \global\@twocolumnmodetrue +\newif\if@draftversion \global\@draftversionfalse +\newif\if@draftclsmode \global\@draftclsmodefalse +\newif\if@draftclsmodefoot \global\@draftclsmodefootfalse +\newif\if@confmode \global\@confmodefalse +\newif\if@peerreviewoption \global\@peerreviewoptionfalse +\newif\if@peerreviewcaoption \global\@peerreviewcaoptionfalse + +% we HAVE to turn off technote as there is no +% "not a tech note" option +\newif\if@technote \global\@technotefalse + +% V1.6 we allow the user to control whether or not the +% font interword spacings are tuned to be more like +% that of IEEE. The default is to tune things. +\newif\if@fonttunesettings \global\@fonttunesettingstrue + +% V1.6b flag to show if using a4paper +\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \global\@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + +% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers +% dimen +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +% count +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% token list +\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA + +% we use \@IEEEptsize so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) +% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some +% external packages +\def\@IEEEptsize{10} +\def\@ptsize{0} +% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt +\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\@IEEEptsize{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\@IEEEptsize{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\@IEEEptsize{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} +\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\@IEEEptsize{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} + + +% \@IEEEmarginE is the side margin for equal margins +% \@IEEEmarginW is the wider side margin when the margins are not equal +% NOTE: BOTH of the above margins are as they appear +% on the paper - they are NOT offset by 1 inch +\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% + \def\@IEEEmarginE{0.680in}% + \def\@IEEEmarginW{0.775in}% + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse} + + +\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% + \def\@IEEEmarginE{14.32mm}% + \def\@IEEEmarginW{17mm} + \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue} + +\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse} +\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue \@mparswitchtrue} + +\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\global\@twocolumnmodefalse} +% the file twocolumn.sty is not read as it changes \textwidth. +\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\global\@twocolumnmodetrue} + +% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages +% will go into draft mode. +\DeclareOption{draft}{\global\@draftversiontrue \global\@draftclsmodetrue +\global\@draftclsmodefoottrue} +% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages +% used by the document. +\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\global\@draftversionfalse \global\@draftclsmodetrue +\global\@draftclsmodefoottrue} +% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. +\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\global\@draftversionfalse \global\@draftclsmodetrue +\global\@draftclsmodefootfalse} +% we provide a final option just for completeness (article.cls has one) +\DeclareOption{final}{\global\@draftversionfalse \global\@draftclsmodefalse +\global\@draftclsmodefootfalse} + +\DeclareOption{journal}{\global\@peerreviewoptionfalse \global\@peerreviewcaoptionfalse +\global\@confmodefalse \global\@technotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{conference}{\global\@peerreviewoptionfalse \global\@peerreviewcaoptionfalse +\global\@confmodetrue \global\@technotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{technote}{\global\@peerreviewoptionfalse \global\@peerreviewcaoptionfalse +\global\@confmodefalse \global\@technotetrue} + +\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\global\@peerreviewoptiontrue \global\@peerreviewcaoptionfalse +\global\@confmodefalse \global\@technotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\global\@peerreviewoptiontrue \global\@peerreviewcaoptiontrue +\global\@confmodefalse \global\@technotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\global\@fonttunesettingsfalse} + + +% IEEE uses Times font, so we'll default to times. +% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. +\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} +\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} +\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} +% enable Times now - so that all class options can see the correct font families +\normalfont\selectfont + + +% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal +\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} +% overrride these defaults per user requests +\ProcessOptions + +% we can send console reminder messages to the user here +\AtEndDocument{\if@confmode% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{** Conference Paper **}% +\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% +\typeout{ of your paper;}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% +\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% +\typeout{ process uses the US letter (8.5in X 11in) paper size.}% +\typeout{}% +\fi} + + +% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode +\if@twocolumnmode\else% + \if@draftclsmode\else% + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not normally used with IEEE publications.}% + \fi% +\fi + + +% V1.6, if the user is using pdflatex, go ahead and set the output paper size. +% Otherwise, we declare the papersize via a \special for dvips. +% We keep the tests within braces because otherwise, if not using pdflatex, +% \pdfpageheight and \pdfpagewidth will be set to \relax - possibly affecting +% similar tests of other packages. +{\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{% not using pdflatex, setup paper size for dvips +\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper +\special{papersize=210mm,297mm}% +\else +\special{papersize=8.5in,11in}% +\fi}% +{% using pdftex, set paper size for pdftex +\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth}} + + + +% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} +% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, +% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. +% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as +% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues +% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. +% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. +%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} +%\def\@journal{} + + + +% pointsize values +% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size +\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} +\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} +\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} +\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} + + + +% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) +% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and +% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems +% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want +% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) +% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) +% 10pt 58 12pt (exact) +% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) +% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) +% + +% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size +% in case baselinestretch ever changes. +\newskip\@IEEEnormalsizefontbaselineskip +\@IEEEnormalsizefontbaselineskip\baselineskip + +\ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizenine +\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizefontbaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 10 points +\ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizeten +\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizefontbaselineskip}{12pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 11 points +\ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizefontbaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + +% Check if we have selected 12 points +\ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizefontbaselineskip}{13.92pt}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + +% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for +% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution +% tolerance to turn off this warning +\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} +% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. + + +% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with +% technote +\if@technote% + \ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizenine\else% + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% + \fi% +\fi + + +% set \baselinestretch +\def\baselinestretch{1} +\if@draftclsmode% draft mode uses larger than normal spacing +\def\baselinestretch{1.5} % controls line spacing for draft version +\fi % some people may like 1.7 or greater + % so that there will be even more space + % for hand written comments + +\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect + + +% V1.6 +% store the normalsize baselineskip +\newskip\normalsizebaselineskip +\normalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax +% store the nominal value of jot +\newskip\normaljot +\normaljot=0.25\normalsizebaselineskip\relax + +% set \jot +\jot=\normaljot\relax + + +% abstract and keywords are in \small, except +% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize +% Since 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small +% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt +\let\@IEEEabskeysecsize=\small +\ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizenine + \let\@IEEEabskeysecsize=\footnotesize +\fi + + + +% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing +% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a +% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) +% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. +% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: +% +% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt +% +% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need +% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE +% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. +% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: +% 35% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 50% maximum +% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) +% +% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: +% 37.5% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 55% maximum + +% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use +% for medium (normal weight) +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} + +% for bold +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} + + +% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: +% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space +% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch +% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink +% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands +% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes +\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font weight +\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\mdseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% +\bfseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% +}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font shape +% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are +% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we +% won't alter these either. +\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\normalfont +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalfont\itshape +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +}} + +% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing +% for each font size (and shape and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here +% as \ttfamily uses a fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main +% text of IEEE papers. +\def\@IEEEtunefonts{% +\if@fonttunesettings +{\selectfont\rmfamily +\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}\fi} + +% if needed, revise the interword spacing now - in case IEEEtran makes any default +% length measurements, and make sure all the default fonts are loaded +\@IEEEtunefonts + +% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts +\AtBeginDocument{\@IEEEtunefonts} + + + +% V1.6 +% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations +% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise +% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox +% warning. The author may still have to tweak things, +% but the appearance will be much better "right out +% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. +% TeX default is 50 +\hyphenpenalty=750 +% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. +% The TeX default is 1000 +\hbadness=1350 +% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation +\frenchspacing + + + +% we want to maintain textheight as an integer multiple of +% \baselineskip. Keep \topsep in with this game plan too. +\topskip=\baselineskip +% set sizes and margins +% Book typesetting is a world where point and pica (12pt) reign supreme. +% IEEE textwidth is 21 pica. They have a colsep of 1 pica. +% V1.6 conference mode margins +\if@confmode + \topmargin -0.25in + \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences + % However, we will adjust this a tad so that an integer number + % of lines will always fit on each page + % The baselineskip (leading) for each document point size is used + % to determine these values + % rounded up an extra 0.1pt or so to prevent trouble with any rounding errors + \ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=674.0pt\fi %9.3261in 61 lines/page + \ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=672.1pt\fi %9.2998in 56 lines/page + \ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=669.3pt\fi %9.2611in 50 lines/page + \ifx\@IEEEptsize\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=668.3pt\fi %9.2473in 48 lines/page +\else + \topmargin -49.0pt + \textheight 58pc % = 9.63in or 696pt +\fi + + +\textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc +\columnsep 1pc + + +% IEEE MARGIN INFO and new \overrideIEEEmargins command +% V1.6 revised margins again +% IEEE wants the side margins to be equal under both US letter +% and A4 paper +% +% However, for those of you who need to bind copies of your work +% (for review distribution, etc.) the \overrideIEEEmargins +% command will shift the text a tad away from the binding +% edge. +% +% + + +% the default side margins are equal +\oddsidemargin \@IEEEmarginE +\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset +\evensidemargin \@IEEEmarginE +\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset + +% execute \overrideIEEEmargins in the preamble to make the side margin +% near the spine slightly wider so that the paper will be much more +% agreeable to being bound. \overrideIEEEmargins will have no effect +% when in draft or draftcls mode. +\def\overrideIEEEmargins{\if@draftclsmode\relax\else% + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding IEEE standard margins (line \the\inputlineno).}% + \if@twoside + % for double sided, odd pages have the bound side on the left + % make this the wide margin + \oddsidemargin\@IEEEmarginW + % and even pages have the narrow margin on the left + % as they are bound on the right + % evensidemargin is to be the narrow margin + % calculate the narrow margin and set evensidemargin + \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\paperwidth}% + \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-\@IEEEmarginW}% + \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-\textwidth}% + \else + % for single sided the bound side is always on the left + % make this the wide margin + \oddsidemargin\@IEEEmarginW + \evensidemargin\@IEEEmarginW + \fi + \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1.0in}% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset + \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1.0in}% +\fi} + + +\parindent 1.0em + +% conference papers do not have headers, other papers need +% to reserve space for them +\if@confmode +\headsep 0in +\headheight 0in +\else +\headsep 0.25in +\headheight 12pt +\fi + +% V1.6, if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch +\lineskip 0pt +\normallineskip 0pt +\lineskiplimit 0pt +\normallineskiplimit 0pt + + +% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the +% footline +\footskip 0.4in + +% normally zero, should be relative to font height. +% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) +\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex + + + +% draft mode settings override that of all other modes +% provides a nice 1" margin all around the paper and extra +% space between the lines for editor's comments +\if@draftclsmode +\headsep 0.25in +\headheight 12pt +% want 1" from top of paper to text +\setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% +\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% + +% we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type +\oddsidemargin 0in +\evensidemargin 0in + +% set the text width - start with the entire page +\setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% +% subtract for the 1" top/bottom margins +\addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% +% give them a textheight that won't have underfull +% vbox problems, but can't help them if they later change +% baselinestretch from its default +\setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% +\addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% +% subtract of first line taken by \topskip +\addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% +% now digitize \textheight so that the length after +% the first line is an integer multiple of \baselineskip +% to cut down on underfull vbox errors in draft mode +\divide\textheight by \baselineskip% +\multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% +% add back the first line +\addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% +\fi + + + +% margin note stuff +\marginparsep 10pt +\marginparwidth 20pt +\marginparpush 25pt + + +% LIST SPACING CONTROLS + +% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing +% above and below \trivlist +% Both \list and IED lists override this. +% However, \trivlist will use this as will most +% things built from \trivlist like the \center +% environment. +\topsep 0.5\baselineskip + +% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded +% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase +% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. +% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. +\partopsep \z@ + +% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. +% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs +% so this is also zero. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to +% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). +\parsep \z@ + +% Controls the extra spacing between list items. +% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect +% lists (but not IED lists). +\itemsep \z@ + +% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list +% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter +% it, you have to do so when you call the \list. +% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment +% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below +\itemindent -1em + +% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to +% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. +% Hence this statement does nothing for lists. +% But, quote and verse do use it for indention. +\leftmargin 2em + +% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list +% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and +% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they +% all are overridden. +\leftmargini 2em +%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. +%\leftmargini 0em +\leftmarginii 1em +\leftmarginiii 1.5em +\leftmarginiv 1.5em +\leftmarginv 1.0em +\leftmarginvi 1.0em +\labelsep 0.5em +\labelwidth \z@ + + +% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. +% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the +% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the +% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). +% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around +% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. +% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in +% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes +% of these values DO affect \list +% +\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} +\let\@listI\@listi +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} + + +% IEEE uses 5) not 5. +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} + +% IEEE uses a) not (a) +\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} + +% IEEE uses iii) not iii. +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} + +% IEEE uses A) not A. +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} + +% exactly the same as in article.cls +\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} +\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} +\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} + +% itemized list label styles +\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$} +\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} +\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} +\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} + + +% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 +% These values serve as a way a .tex file can +% determine if the new features are provided. +% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from +% these values. i.e., V1.4 +% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- +% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) +\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} +\def\IEEEtransversionminor{6} + + +% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** +% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls +% *************************** +% +% +% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by +% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right +% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal +% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use +% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications +% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. +% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose +% which one you like in your document using a command such as: +% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA +\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent + +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB +\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent +% However, we'll default to using \parindent +% which makes more sense to me +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent +\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA + + +% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent +\IEEEelabelindent \parindent + +% This controls the default amount the description list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent +\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent + +% This is the value actually used within the IED lists. +% The IED environments automatically set its value to +% one of the three values above, so global changes do +% not have any effect +\newdimen\labelindent +\labelindent \parindent + +% The actual amount labels will be indented is +% \labelindent multiplied by the factor below +% corresponding to the level of nesting depth +% This provides a means by which the user can +% alter the effective \labelindent for deeper +% levels +% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" +% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific +% circumstances. +% The first list level almost always has full indention. +% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation +% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing +% that they don't use any indentation. +\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} + +% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto +% set to one of the 6 values above +% global changes here have no effect +\def\labelindentfactor{1.0} + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for +% the labels. +\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep +\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for +% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the +% spacing in these cases +\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em + +% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and +% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing +% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. +\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep +\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt + + +% This command is executed within each IED list environment +% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the +% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing +% global parameters that affect things other than lists. +% i.e., renewcommand{\iedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} +% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until +% \iedlistdecl is redefined. +\def\iedlistdecl{\relax} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based +% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \labelindent +% Usage: \calcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} +% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: +% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\calcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the +% width of the given text. It is the same as +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} +% and useful as a shorter alternative. +% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width +% of the longest label in the list +\def\setlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} + +% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the +% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal +% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via +% the \iedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments. +\def\usemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} + +% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically +% calculate \leftmargin from \labelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep +% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin +% This flag must be set (\nocalcleftmargintrue or \nocalcleftmarginfalse) +% via the \iedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifnocalcleftmargin +\nocalcleftmarginfalse + +% A flag which controls whether \labelindent is multiplied by +% the \labelindentfactor for each list level. +% This flag must be set via the \iedlistdecl or within the option +% of the IED list environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifnolabelindentfactor +\nolabelindentfactorfalse + + +% internal variable to indicate type of IED label +% justification +% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right +\def\@iedjustify{0} + + +% commands to allow the user to control IED +% label justifications. Use these commands within +% the IED environment option or in the \iedlistdecl +% Note that changing the normal list justifications +% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! +% I include these commands as they may be helpful to +% those who are using these enhanced list controls for +% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. +% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right +% justification, description defaults to left. +\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\def\@iedjustify{0}}%left +\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\def\@iedjustify{1}}%center +\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\def\@iedjustify{2}}%right + + + + +% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies +% this allows us to set all the list parameters within +% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) +% from overriding any of our parameters +% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} + +% Note controlled spacing here +\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% +\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% +\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% +\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% +\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% +\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% +\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% +\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% +\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% +\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} + + +% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments +% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description +% which must be created by the base classes +% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate +\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize +\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize +\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate +\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate + +% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls +\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} + {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} + {\endlist} +\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep + \normalfont\bfseries #1} + + +% override LaTeX's default IED lists +\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\description{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + +% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that +% override itemize, enumerate, or description +\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + + +% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal +% commands so they are protected against redefinition +\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} +\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% + \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\labelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@iedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \nocalcleftmarginfalse% + \nolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \labelindent\IEEEilabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % the user can override this later if + % they specified a \labelwidth + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \iedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\labelindent=\labelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \labelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\calcleftmargin{\labelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% + \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\labelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@iedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \nocalcleftmarginfalse% + \nolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \labelindent\IEEEelabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using + % normalfont 1) to 9) + % The user can override this later + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \iedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\labelindent=\labelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \labelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\calcleftmargin{\labelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\labelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@iedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \nocalcleftmarginfalse% + \nolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \labelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% + % assume normal labelsep + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % Bogus label width in case the user forgets + % to set it. + % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you + % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to + % display it on the screen during compilation + % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out + % which label is the widest) + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \iedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\labelindent=\labelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \labelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\calcleftmargin{\labelindent}\relax% + \fi}\fi} + +% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. +\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@iedjustify 0\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else +\if\@iedjustify 1\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else +\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} + + +% VERSE and QUOTE +\def\verse{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]} +\let\endverse\endlist +\def\quotation{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item[]} +\let\endquotation=\endlist +\def\quote{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]} +\let\endquote=\endlist + + +% \titlepage +% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct +% way to create the title page. +\newif\if@restonecol +\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} +\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} + +% standard values from article.cls +\arraycolsep 5pt +\arrayrulewidth .4pt +\doublerulesep 2pt + +\tabcolsep 6pt +\tabbingsep 0.5em + + +%% FOOTNOTES +% +%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt +% V1.6 respond to changes in font size +% space added above the footnotes (if present) +\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes +% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in +% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep +% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed +% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since +% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip +% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to +% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing +% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad +% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps +% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks now uses +% its own value of \footnotesep. +{\footnotesize +\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} + + +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\fboxsep = 3pt +\fboxrule = .4pt +% V1.6 use 1em, the use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark +% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need +% box resizing tricks here. +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em + +\def\footnoterule{} + +% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages +\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 + +% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations +% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, +% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. +\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 + + +\if@technote + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} +\else + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} +\fi + + +\newcounter{section} +\newcounter{subsection}[section] +\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] +\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] + +% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may +% have their own, different, implementations +\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] + +% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I +\def\thesubsection{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}} % I-A +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A.1 +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\alph{paragraph}} % I-A.1.a +\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 +\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) + +% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) +% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes +% in the former to automatically appear in the latter +\def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. +\def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. +\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) +\def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) +% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum +\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) +% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray +\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) +% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on +% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis +\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} + +% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS +% +\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} +\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} +\def\@dotsep{4.5} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} + +% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily +% collide with the section titles. +% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. +% MDS 1/2001 +\def\tableofcontents{\section*{Contents}\@starttoc{toc}} +\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% + \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% + \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% + \endgroup} +% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep +\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} +\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} +% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth +% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents +% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! +\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} +\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} +\def\listoffigures{\section*{List of Figures}\@starttoc{lof}} +\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} +\def\listoftables{\section*{List of Tables}\@starttoc{lot}} +\let\l@table\l@figure + + +%% Definitions for floats +%% +%% Normal Floats +\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\topfraction{1.0} +\def\bottomfraction{.4} +\def\floatpagefraction{0.8} +\def\textfraction{.2} + +%% Double Column Floats +\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. +% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best +% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable +% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and +% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with +% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex +% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. +% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't +% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. + +\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\dbltopfraction{1.0} +\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} + +\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\setcounter{topnumber}{2} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{4} + + +%% redefine CAPTION +% V1.4 add user control for short figure caption justification +\newif\ifcenterfigcaptions + +% V1.6 set the default according to conference mode +\if@confmode +\centerfigcaptionstrue +\else +\centerfigcaptionsfalse +\fi + +% article class provides these, we should too. +\newlength\abovecaptionskip +\newlength\belowcaptionskip +% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table +% captions +\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip} +\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt} +% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be +% overridden by a user +\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% +\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% + + +% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments +% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. +\def\@IEEEtablestring{table} + +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\\{\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace% V1.6 was a hard coded 8pt +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace% V1.6 was a hard coded 5pt +% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\footnotesize #1.~~ #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\footnotesize #1.~~ }% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, +% allow user to control short figure caption justification (left or center) +\else% +\ifcenterfigcaptions \hbox to\hsize{\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\else \hbox to\hsize{\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi\fi} + + +\newcounter{figure} +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} +\def\fps@figure{tbp} +\def\ftype@figure{1} +\def\ext@figure{lof} +\def\fnum@figure{Fig.~\thefigure} +\def\figure{\@float{figure}} +\def\endfigure{\end@float} +\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} +\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} +\newcounter{table} +\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} +\def\fps@table{tbp} +\def\ftype@table{2} +\def\ext@table{lot} +\def\fnum@table{TABLE~\thetable} +% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables +% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray +\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} +\def\endtable{\end@float} +% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. +\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} +\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} + + + + +%% +%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% +%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX +%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, +%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, +%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. +%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) + + +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form +\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse + +\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter +% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray +% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both +\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue + +\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined +\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used + + +% The default math style used by the columns +\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} +% The default text style used by the columns +% default to using the current font +\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} + +% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} + +% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber +% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package +% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as +% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. +\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} + + +\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% +\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} + +% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation +\newif\if@IEEEissubequation% +\@IEEEissubequationfalse + +% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers +\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} + +% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments +% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the +% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} +\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% +% check if column is defined +\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% +\else% if not, error and use default type +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% +\fi% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} + +% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} + + +% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} + + +% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} + + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types + + +% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list +% used to build up the \halign preamble +\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% +\@@IEEEappendtoksA} + +% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument +% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register +\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% +\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% +\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} + +% define some common column types for the user +% math +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} +% text +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} + +% vertical rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% +{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} + +% horizontal rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} + +% plain +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} + +% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} + + +% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} +% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} + +% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column +% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + + + +% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell +% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] +% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. +\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + + +% draws a single rule across all the columns optional +% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] +\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule +% turn off any struts +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + + + +% inserts a full row's worth of &'s +% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns +% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% +\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all +\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% +\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count +\repeat% +\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s +} + + + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines +\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used + + + +% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% save values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} + +% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} + + +% globally restores the strut height and depth to the +% master values and sets the master strut flag to true +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} + + +% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current +% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth +% and the use master strut flag, global +% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried +% into the isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height +% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside +% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut +% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut +% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip +% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height +% and depth to both the master and local struts. +% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth +% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use +% of the local strut values. +% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip0=0pt\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip2=0pt\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local and master strut sizes +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% allow user a way to see the struts +\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts +\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse + +% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +\else% +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +% allow user to see struts if desired +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} + + +% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray +% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. +% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 +\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} +\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip0=#1\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip2=#2\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} + + +% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the +% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% +\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} + + + +\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} +\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + + +% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. +% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} +\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% + % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not + % the star form was involked + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse + \else% not the star form + \global\@eqnswtrue + \fi% if star form + \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations + \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\normaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet + \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label + \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % put in the column for the equation number + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the isolation column + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the equation number col to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% + % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the display alignment + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use +% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, +% restore counters to correct values and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% +\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% +$$\@ignoretrue} + +% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation +\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% +\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse + +% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column +% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column + {\ifnum0=`}\fi + \@ifstar{% + \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }{% + \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }% +} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% + \ifnum0=`{\fi}% + \@@IEEEeqnarraycr + \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% + +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak + environment}% + {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak + specifications.}\relax% + \else + \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count + \repeat + % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column + \fi + % execute the &'s + \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% + % handle the strut/isolation column + \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray + &% and enter the equation number column + % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the + % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was + \if@eqnsw% + \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% + \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter + \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% + \fi% + % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi + \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag + % reset the number of columns the user actually used + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax + % the real end of the line + \cr} + + + + + +% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything +% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second +% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, +% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox +% within an hbox. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within +% a \hbox{$ $} construct. +% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. +% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - +% natural width is the default. +% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} +% for \vcenter in non-math mode +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} + +% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs +\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax% + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\normaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % add the isolation column to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the alignment + \everycr{}% + % use only the very first token to determine the positioning + % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, + % but is probably not worth the effort + % \noindent is used as a delimiter + \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% + \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent + % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded + % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now + \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% + % use the appropriate vbox type + \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% + \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% + \bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, +% exit from math mode if needed, and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values +% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray +% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\crcr\egroup\egroup% +% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed +\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} + + + +% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column +% carry strut status into isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +{\ifnum0=`}\fi% +\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} + +% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% +\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% starts the halign preamble build +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start +\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known +% ensure these are valid +\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition +% currently acquired numerically referenced glue +% use a name that is easier to remember +\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0% +% tracks number of columns in the preamble +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% +% record the default end glues +\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% +\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% +% now parse the user's column specifications +\@@IEEEbuildpreamble} + + +% parses and builds the halign preamble +\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% +% use only the very first token to check the end +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% +% identify current and next token type +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next +% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% +% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% +% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% +% process the acquired glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% +% process the acquired col +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% +% ready prevtype for next col spec. +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% +% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group +\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} + + +% executed just after preamble build is completed +% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue +\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% +{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% +\fi%num cols less than 1 +%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} + + +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded +% n = number +% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) +% c = letter +% e = \end +% u = undefined +% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else +\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences +\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +\if#2u\relax +\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% +{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak +as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} + + +% identify the current letter referenced column +% if invalid, use a default column +\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} + + +% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value +\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% +% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) +% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) +% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) +% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) +% ' = \quad 1em +% " = \qquad 2em +% . = 0.5\arraycolsep +% / = \arraycolsep +% ? = 2\arraycolsep +% * = 1fil +% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter +% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero +% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 +% value for 1em. +% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text +% \noindent is used as a delimiter here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% get the math font 1em value +% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs +% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. +% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure +% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, +% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. +% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. +{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% +% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% +% identify the glue value based on the first token +% we discard anything after the first +\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else +\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else +\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else +\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else +\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak +IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + + + +% process a numerical digit from the column specification +% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value +% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired +\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% +\else% if we previously aborted a glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion +\else%acquire this number +% save the previous type before the numerical digits started +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% +\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% +\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% +\else%user glue not defined +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak +\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\fi% glue defined or not +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition +\fi%close acquisition, get glue +\fi%discard or acquire number +\fi%prevtype glue or not +} + + +% process an acquired glue +% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions +\else +% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else +% as this is not used in the preamble, but before +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\else%not the start glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\else% not a back to back glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak +type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak +specifier}% +{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak +between column types.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\fi% previous was a column +\fi% back-to-back glues +\fi% is start column glue +\fi% prev type not a +} + + +% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else +% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) +% so we must add this column to the preamble now +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\fi%next type not numeral +\fi%next type not glue +} + + +%% +%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% + + + + +% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different +% modes IEEEtran supports +\if@twoside + \if@technote + \def\ps@headings{% + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} + \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} + \if@draftclsmode + \if@draftclsmodefoot + \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} + \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} + \else + \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% + \fi + \else + \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{} + \fi} + \else % not a technote + \def\ps@headings{% + \if@confmode + \def\@oddhead{} + \def\@evenhead{} + \else + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} + \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} + \fi + \if@draftclsmode + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} + \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} + \if@draftclsmodefoot + \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} + \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} + \else + \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% + \fi + \else + \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% + \fi} + \fi +\else % single side +\def\ps@headings{% + \if@confmode + \def\@oddhead{} + \def\@evenhead{} + \else + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} + \def\@evenhead{} + \fi + \if@draftclsmode + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} + \def\@evenhead{} + \if@draftclsmodefoot + \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT} + \else + \def\@oddfoot{} + \fi + \else + \def\@oddfoot{} + \fi + \def\@evenfoot{}} +\fi + + +% title page style +\def\ps@titlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% +\if@confmode + \def\@oddhead{}% + \def\@evenhead{}% +\else + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% + \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% +\fi +\if@draftclsmode + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% + \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% + \if@draftclsmodefoot + \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% + \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% + \fi +\else + % all non-draft mode footers + \if@IEEEusingpubid + % for title pages that are using a pubid + % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option + \if@peerreviewoption + \else + \footskip 0pt% + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@pubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@pubid}\hss}% + \fi + \fi +\fi} + + +% peer review cover page style +\def\ps@peerreviewcoverpagestyle{% +\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% +\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% +\if@draftclsmode + \if@draftclsmodefoot + \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% + \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% + \fi +\else + % non-draft mode footers + \if@IEEEusingpubid + \footskip 0pt% + \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@pubid}\hss}% + \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@pubid}\hss}% + \fi +\fi} + + +% start with empty headings +\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} + + +%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same +%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. +%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text +%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually +%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the +%% arguments to \markboth. +\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\def\rightmark{\MakeUppercase{#2}}} +\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} + +\def\today{\ifcase\month\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi + \space\number\day, \number\year} + + + + +%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS +%% +%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff +% +% +% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" +\def\@citex[#1]#2{% + \let\@citea\@empty + \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do + {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% + {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} + +% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's +% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the +% following format controls are already defined and will not +% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the +% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - +% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] +% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. +% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will +% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally +% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in +% that \cite. +% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments +% to produce the IEEE style. +\def\citepunct{], [} +\def\citedash{]--[} + + +% V1.6b providing this command makes hyperref think the natbib package is +% in use so that it will not interfere with cite.sty. However, as a result, +% citation numbers will not be hyperlinked. +\def\NAT@parse{\typeout{IEEEtran error: Attempt to use fake Natbib command +which is provided to fool Hyperref.}} +% it easy enough to override via: +% \let\NAT@parse\undefined + + +% V1.6 class files should always provide these +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} +\let\@openbib@code\@empty + + + +% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. +\def\bstctlcite#1{\@bsphack + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% + \@esphack} + +% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before +% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance +% the columns on the last page +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that + % the command is not executed +\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} + +% allow the user to alter the triggered command +\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} + +% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the +% command is executed +\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% + +% trigger command at the given reference +\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% +\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} + +\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} + +\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{References}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{References}% + % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger + \footnotesize \vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% + \leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax + \itemsep 0pt plus .5pt\relax% + \usecounter{enumiv}% + \let\p@enumiv\@empty + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% + \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% +% originally: +% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% +% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more +% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. +% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with +% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, +% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. +% MDS 11/2000 +\if@technote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% +\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} +\let\endthebibliography=\endlist + + + + +% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS +% +% +% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author +% IEEE membership. +\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\sublargesize\normalfont\textit{#1}}} + + +% \authorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. +% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \authorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote +% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \authorrefmark{} +% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you +% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \authorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote +% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. +% \authorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical +% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that +% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \authorrefmark{} from colliding +% with the text above. +\def\authorrefmark#1{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% + \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% + \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} + + +% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS +% +% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\sublargesize} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\normalsize} +% The default if the user does not use an author block +\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\sublargesize} + +% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) +% can be negative +\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} + +% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% This can be negative. +% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these +% controls in place in case they ever change their mind. +% Personally, I like 0.75ex. +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} +% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make +% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the +% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, +% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep +% these above 2.6ex +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} + +% This tracks the required strut size. +% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. +\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} + +% variables to retain font size and style across groups +% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} + +% saves the current font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} + +% restores the saved font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% +\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% +\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% +\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% +\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% +\selectfont} + + +% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column +\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse + + +% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace +% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines +% within the halign environment. +% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above +% baseline portion at 70% of the total length. +% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch +\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} + + +% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. +% Makes formatting easy for conferences +% +% use real definitions in conference mode +% name block +\def\authorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% +% input the author names +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr} +% spacer row for names +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} +% +% affiliation block +\def\authorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% +% input the author affiliations +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr} +% spacer row for affiliations +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} + + +% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other +% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. +\if@confmode +\else + \if@peerreviewcaoption\else + % not conference or peerreviewca mode + \def\authorblockN#1{#1}% + \def\authorblockA#1{#1}% + \fi +\fi + + + +% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular +\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style + \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=0pt\relax% + \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one + \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing + \everycr{}% ensure no problems here + \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet + \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space + \vtop\bgroup%vtop box + \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax + \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} + +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} + +% handle bogus star form +\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} + +% end the line and do the optional spacer +\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNand +\@IEEEWARNandtrue + +% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a +% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid +% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. +\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override + +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only + when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} + +\if@confmode% +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi +\if@peerreviewcaoption +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi + + +% page clearing command +% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles +% for the inserted blank pages +\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else +\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} + + +% user command to invoke the title page +\def\maketitle{\par% + \begingroup% + \normalfont% + \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty + \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author + \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines + \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info + \normalsize% + \if@peerreviewoption + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% + \thispagestyle{peerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% + \else + \if@twocolumn% + \if@technote% + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% + \else + \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]% + \fi + \else + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% + \fi + \thispagestyle{titlepagestyle}\@thanks% + \fi + % pullup page for pubid if used. + \if@IEEEusingpubid + \enlargethispage{-\@pubidpullup}% + \fi + \endgroup + \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax + \gdef\@thanks{} + % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers + % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% + \let\thanks\relax} + + +% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional +% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line +\def\@maketitle{\newpage +\begin{center}% +\if@technote% + {\bfseries\large\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@author\@specialpapernotice\par}% +\else% not a technote + \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par% + % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode + \if@confmode% + {\@specialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}% + \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal + \if@peerreviewcaoption + % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode + {\@specialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}% + \else % journal or peerreview + {\lineskip.5em\sublargesize\@author\@specialpapernotice\par}% + \fi + \fi +\fi\end{center}} + + + +% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed +\if@peerreviewoption +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% +\if@twocolumnmode +\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] +\else +\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip +\fi +\thispagestyle{titlepagestyle}} +\else +% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} +\fi + +% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. +\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}% +\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par +\end{center}} + + + +% V1.6 +% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text +% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column +% of two column text (technotes). +\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize +% adjust spacing to next text +% v1.6b handle peer review papers +\if@peerreviewoption +% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages +% regardless of the other paper modes + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip +\else + \if@confmode% conference + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% + \if@technote% technote + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% journal uses more space + \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% + \fi + \fi +\fi}} + + +% V1.6 +% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors +% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two +% column text (most common) +% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the +% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip +% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the +% text on the titlepage +% The possible use of \pubid must also be taken into account. +\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% + % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done + \def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height + \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names + \let\@maintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns + \let\@INTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines + % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer + % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to + % become less than \@MINtitlevspace - instead it will be + % lengthened + % default to journal values + \def\@NORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% + \def\@MINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% + % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing + \if@confmode%conference + \def\@NORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% + \def\@MINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% + \fi + \if@technote%technote + \def\@NORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% + \def\@MINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% + \fi% + % get the height that the title will take up + \if@peerreviewoption + \settoheight{\@maintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% + \else + \settoheight{\@maintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% + \fi + \@maintextheight=-\@maintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign + % add the height of the page textheight + \advance\@maintextheight by \textheight% + % correct for title pages using pubid + \if@peerreviewoption\else + % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. + % And the cover page uses a static spacer. + \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@maintextheight by -\@pubidpullup\fi + \fi% + % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer + \advance\@maintextheight by -\@NORMtitlevspace% + % \topskip takes away some too + \advance\@maintextheight by -\topskip% + % calculate the column height of the main text for lines + % now we calculate the main text height as if holding + % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first + % and discard any excess fractional remainder + % we subtracted the first line, because the first line + % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the + % rest of the lines. + \@INTmaintextheight=\@maintextheight% + \divide\@INTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + \multiply\@INTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will + % have to be reduced from nominal (\@REDUCEmaintextheight is always + % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer + % number of normal size lines + % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer + % need \@INTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register + \let\@REDUCEmaintextheight=\@INTmaintextheight% + \advance\@REDUCEmaintextheight by -\@maintextheight% + \advance\@REDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% + % this is the calculated height of the spacer + % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer + % need \@maintextheight and can reuse its dimen register + \let\@COMPENSATElen=\@maintextheight% + \@COMPENSATElen=\@NORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value + % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase + \ifdim\@REDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% + \advance\@COMPENSATElen by -\@REDUCEmaintextheight% + % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead + \ifdim\@COMPENSATElen<\@MINtitlevspace\relax% + \advance\@COMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% + \fi% + \else% + % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease + \advance\@COMPENSATElen by -\@REDUCEmaintextheight% + \advance\@COMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% + \fi% + % set the calculated rigid spacer + \vspace{\@COMPENSATElen}}} + + + +% V1.6 +% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area +% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed +% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. +\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax +\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} + + +% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines +% so that spacing is more tightly controlled. +\def\abstract{\normalfont% + \if@twocolumn% + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{Abstract}---\,% + \else% + \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{Abstract}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in +% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) +\def\endabstract{\relax\if@confmode\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% + \normalfont\normalsize} + + +\def\keywords{\normalfont% + % IEEE uses the term (in bold italics) "Index Terms" now. + \if@twocolumn% + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{Index Terms}---\,\relax% + \else% + \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries Index Terms\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\endkeywords{\relax\if@technote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi% + \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% + \normalsize\normalfont} + + +% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that +% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token +% +% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input +% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not +% affect the formatting of the text +\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % +\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% a control space will come in as a macro +% when it is the last one on a line +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one +% else spit it out and stop gobbling +\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% +\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% +\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% + + + + +% TITLING OF SECTIONS +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are + % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a space + +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} + +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth% + \def\@svsec{}% + \else% + \refstepcounter{#1} + % load section label and spacer into \@svsec + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi% + \@tempskipa #5\relax% + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high + \begingroup #6\relax% or low level heading + \noindent % subsections are NOT indented + % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title + %\@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par} + % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal + \relax{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}% + \endgroup% + % got rid of sectionmark stuff + % \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7} + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else% + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% + \else % printout low level headings + % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} + % got rid of sectionmark stuff + \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}%\csname #1mark\endcsname{#7} + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else% + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}} + \fi%skip down + \@xsect{#5}} + +% section* handler +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax% + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% + %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup + % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal + \begingroup \noindent #4\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup% + % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} + \else \def\@svsechd{#4\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}\fi% + \@xsect{#3}} + + +%% SECTION heading spacing and font +%% +% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name +% (for \@sect) #2 - section level +% #3 - section heading indent +% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) +% If negative, make stretch parts negative too! +% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, +% negative: amount to indent main text after heading +% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation +% #6 - font control +% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent +% trouble when you do something like: +% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... +% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section +% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good +% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. +\if@confmode% +% IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\else % for journals +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\fi +% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% + + + +%% ENVIRONMENTS +% "box" symbols at end of proofs +\def\QEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box +% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one +\def\QEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} +\def\QED{\QEDclosed} % default to closed + +\def\proof{\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape Proof: }} +\def\endproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\QED\par\endtrivlist\unskip} +%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable +\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% + \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% +% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. + \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\unskip} + +% V1.6 +% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection +% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. +% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number +% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. +\def\@IEEEthmcounterin#1{\arabic{#1}} +% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterin +\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% + \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% + \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterin{#3}\@thmcountersep\@thmcounter{#1}}% + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} + + + +%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE +\ps@headings +\pagenumbering{arabic} + +% normally the page counter starts at 1 +\setcounter{page}{1} +% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 +% (for duplex printing) +\if@peerreviewoption + \if@twoside + \setcounter{page}{-1} + \else + \setcounter{page}{0} + \fi +\fi + +% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as +% needed when single sided +\if@twoside\else\raggedbottom\fi +% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and +% enforce a rigid position for the last lines +\if@twocolumnmode +% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn + \if@peerreviewoption\else + \twocolumn + \fi +\sloppy +\flushbottom +\fi + + + + +% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions + +% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package +% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command +% is present or not. +% For instance: +% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} +% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if +% \appendices is invoked. +% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending +% on whether the user specifies a title: +% \section{My appendix title} +% or not: +% \section{} +% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title +% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of +% contents +\begingroup +\catcode`\Q=3 +\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} +\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} +\endgroup +% end of \@ifmtarg defs + +% save the "original" meaning of \section so we can redefine +% \section after a call to \appendix or \appendices +\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section + +% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} +% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no +% argument (title) +% note we reroute the call to the old \section* +\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% +\@ifmtarg{#1}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{Appendix \thesectiondis}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Appendix \thesection}}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{Appendix \thesectiondis \\* #1}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Appendix \thesection: #1}}} + +% we use this if the user calls \section{} after +% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the +% command and its argument. Then, warn the user. +\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless +\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} + + +% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls +% and in the Table of Contents. +% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself + +% appendix command for one single appendix +% normally has no heading. However, if you want a +% heading, you can do so via the optional argument: +% \appendix[Optional Heading] +\def\appendix{\relax} +\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\par% + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \def\theHsection{Appendix.A}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{0}% + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \def\thesection{}% + \def\thesectiondis{}% + \def\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{Appendix}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Appendix}}{% + \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{Appendix \\* #1}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Appendix: #1}}% + % redefine \section command for appendix + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% + \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument + % of the normal form +} + + +% provides the user a way to choose between +% Appendix A +% and +% Appendix I +% notation +% defaults to Roman. +\newif\ifuseRomanappendices +\useRomanappendicestrue + + +% appendices command for multiple appendices +% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to +% declare the individual appendices +\def\appendices{\par% + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \def\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \ifuseRomanappendices% + \def\thesection{\Roman{section}}% + \def\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% + \else% + \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}% + \def\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% + \fi% + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix + % redefine \section command for appendices + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form + \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, + \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument + % of the normal form +} + + + +% \PARstart +% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the +% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter +% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the +% first word which will be rendered in upper case. +% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: +% +% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment +% within the paragraph that uses \PARstart. +% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family +% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that +% interword glue will now work as normal. +% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. +% +% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. +% +% the number of lines that are indented to clear it +\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} +% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@PARstart +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} +% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline +% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum +% of this value and the height of a capital "T" in the current +% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip +% so that it can respond to changes therein. +\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} +% This is the separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. +% Lengths that depend on the font (i.e., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced +% to the font that is active when PARstart is called. +\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} + + +% definition of \PARstart +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES +% +% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use +% of \PARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter +% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second +% argument is the rest of the first word(s). +\def\PARstart#1#2{\par{% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% on a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% +% calculate the desired height of the big letter +% it extends from the top of a capital "T" in the current font +% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{T}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% +% extract the name of the current font in bold +% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME +\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% +{\bfseries% +\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% +\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}% +% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired +% height of the drop letter +\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% +% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\MakeUppercase{#1}}% +% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the +% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% +\typeout{** WARNING: PARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% +\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% +\fi% +% and store it as a counter +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital +% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, +% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA +% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer +% division. Hence the use of the counters. +% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will +% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% +% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by +% floating point values +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the +% big letter. +\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the +% hanging indent +\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont\MakeUppercase{#1}}}% +% end of the isolated calculation environment +% add in the extra clearance we want +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP% +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the +% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use +% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command +% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other +% text won't be displaced by it. +\noindent\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% +\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEPARstartfont\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\MakeUppercase{#2}} + + +% V1.6 \CMPARstart is no longer needed as \PARstart now uses whatever +% the current font family is. +% \CMPARstart is provided here for backward compatability. +\let\CMPARstart=\PARstart + + + +% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater +% than the specified space of argument one +% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) +% and issue a \newpage +% +% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} +% +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau +% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, +% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine +% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead +\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left +\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% +\newpage% +\fi\endgroup} + + + +% BIOGRAPHY ENVIRONMENT +% Allows user to enter BIOGRAPHY leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) +% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! +% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a +% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. +% MDS 7/2001 +% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries +\newif\if@biographyTOCentrynotmade +\global\@biographyTOCentrynotmadetrue + +% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies +% and not just the previous section +\newcounter{biography} +\setcounter{biography}{0} + +% photo area size +\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area +% area cleared for photo +\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area + % actual depth will be a multiple of + % \baselineskip, rounded up +\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography + +\newenvironment{biography}[2][]{\normalfont\footnotesize% +\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% +% we need enough space to support the hanging indent +% the nominal value of the spacer +% and one extra line for good measure +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% with a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% +% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill +\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +% the default box for where the photo goes +\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% +% +% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the +% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above +% and if so, override the default box with what they want +\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% +\centering% +#1% +\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@biographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{biography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{biography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@biographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{biography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% +% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the +% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so +% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the +% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. +\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command +\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate +% set the hanging indent +\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% +\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% +% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything +\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% +% now place the author name and begin the bio text +\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% +% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area +% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry +% MDS +\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding + \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% + \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut +\fi% +\par\normalfont} + + + +% V1.6 +% added biography without a photo environment +\newenvironment{biographynophoto}[1]{% +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@biographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{biography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{biography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@biographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{biography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% +\normalfont\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% +\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +\parskip=0pt\par% +\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} + + +% provide the user with some old font commands +% got this from article.cls +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} + + +% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS +% +% holds the special notice text +\def\@specialpapernotice{\relax} + +% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: +% \specialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle +\def\specialpapernotice#1{\if@confmode% +\def\@specialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}% +\else% +\def\@specialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% +\fi} + + + + +% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS +% to insert a publisher's ID footer +% V1.6 \pubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style +% occurs in \maketitle. \pubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle +% use \pubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page +% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into +% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author +% names and the maintext. +% +% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the +% publisher's ID footer +% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, +% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction +\def\@pubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} +\if@technote +% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no +% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the +% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the +% second column +% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on +% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for +% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip +% and call it even. +\def\@pubidpullup{2\baselineskip} +\fi + +% holds the ID text +\def\@pubid{\relax} + +% flag so \maketitle can tell if \pubid was called +\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid +\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse +% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom +% V1.6 use before \maketitle +\def\pubid#1{\def\@pubid{#1} \global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} + + +% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in +% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of +% the title page when using \pubid +% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or +% if the user hasn't called \pubid +% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the +% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this +% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility +% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been +% selected because \pubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. +\def\pubidadjcol{\if@peerreviewoption\else\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@pubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi} + +% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other +% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to +% implement the pubid command in LaTeX. + + + +%% Lockout some commands under various conditions + +% general purpose bit bucket +\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} + +% flags to prevent multiple warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks +\newif\if@IEEEWARNPARstart +\newif\if@IEEEWARNCMPARstart +\newif\if@IEEEWARNkeywords +\newif\if@IEEEWARNbiography +\newif\if@IEEEWARNbiographynophoto +\newif\if@IEEEWARNpubid +\newif\if@IEEEWARNpubidadjcol +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext +\@IEEEWARNthankstrue +\@IEEEWARNPARstarttrue +\@IEEEWARNCMPARstarttrue +\@IEEEWARNkeywordstrue +\@IEEEWARNbiographytrue +\@IEEEWARNbiographynophototrue +\@IEEEWARNpubidtrue +\@IEEEWARNpubidadjcoltrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue + + +%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed +%% +% save commands which might be locked out +% so that the user can later restore them if needed +\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks +\let\@IEEESAVECMDPARstart\PARstart +\let\@IEEESAVECMDCMPARstart\CMPARstart +\let\@IEEESAVECMDkeywords\keywords +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendkeywords\endkeywords +\let\@IEEESAVECMDbiography\biography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendbiography\endbiography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDbiographynophoto\biographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendbiographynophoto\endbiographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDpubid\pubid +\let\@IEEESAVECMDpubidadjcol\pubidadjcol +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext + + +% disable \PARstart when in draft mode +% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter +% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch +% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft +% paper. +\if@draftclsmode +\def\PARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\PARstart is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNPARstartfalse} +\def\CMPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\CMPARstart is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNCMPARstartfalse} +\fi +% and for technotes +\if@technote +\def\PARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\PARstart is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNPARstartfalse} +\def\CMPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\CMPARstart is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNCMPARstartfalse} +\fi + + +% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode +\if@confmode +% when locked out, \thanks, \keywords, \biography, \biographynophoto, \pubid, +% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. +% \PARstart and \CMPARstart will output a normal character instead +% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen +% from filling up with redundant messages +\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} +\def\PARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\PARstart is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNPARstartfalse} +\def\CMPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\CMPARstart is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNCMPARstartfalse} + +\renewenvironment{keywords}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNkeywords\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\keywords is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNkeywordsfalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} + +% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. +% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname +% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) +% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine +% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the +% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command +% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX +% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. +% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal +% name can be left undisturbed. +\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\biography is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNbiographyfalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} +% and make biography point to our bogus biography +\let\biography=\@IEEEbogusbiography +\let\endbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography + +\renewenvironment{biographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\biographynophoto is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNbiographynophotofalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} + +\def\pubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\pubid is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNpubidfalse} +\def\pubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\pubidadjcol is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNpubidadjcolfalse} +\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} +\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} +\fi + + +% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out +\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% +\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% +\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% +\let\PARstart\@IEEESAVECMDPARstart% +\let\CMPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDCMPARstart% +\let\keywords\@IEEESAVECMDkeywords% +\let\endkeywords\@IEEESAVECMDendkeywords% +\let\biography\@IEEESAVECMDbiography% +\let\endbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendbiography% +\let\biographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDbiographynophoto% +\let\endbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendbiographynophoto% +\let\pubid\@IEEESAVECMDpubid% +\let\pubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDpubidadjcol% +\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% +\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} + + +\endinput + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% That's all folks! + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c5dec9d8e96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/IEEEtran/IEEEtrantools.sty @@ -0,0 +1,1754 @@ +%% +%% IEEEtrantools.sty 2002/11/18 version V1.1 +%% +%% NOTE: This text file uses UNIX line feed conventions. When (human) +%% reading this file on other platforms, you may have to use a text +%% editor that can handle lines terminated by the UNIX line feed +%% character (0x0A). +%% +%% +%% This package provides several popular and unique commands from the +%% IEEEtran.cls class (version 1.6b) file. +%% +%% The provided commands include \PARstart, \IEEEitemize, \IEEEenumerate, +%% \IEEEdescription as well as the \IEEEeqnarray, \IEEEeqnarraybox family +%% of commands including support commands such as \IEEEstrut. +%% Also provides the \bstctlcite command for the control entry types of +%% IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. +%% +%% IEEEtrantools.sty should not be used with IEEEtran.cls. +%% +%% The latest version and documentation of IEEEtrantools can be obtained at: +%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/IEEEtran/ +%% +%% +%% Copyright (c) 2002 by Michael Shell +%% mshell@ece.gatech.edu +%% See the CTAN website above +%% for current contact information. +%% +%%********************************************************************** +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either +%% expressed or implied; without even the implied warranty of +%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code +%% be liable for any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, +%% incidental, consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the +%% use or misuse of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This code is distributed under the Perl Artistic License +%% ( http://language.perl.com/misc/Artistic.html ) +%% and may be freely used, distributed and modified. +%% Please retain the contribution notices and credits. +%% +%%********************************************************************** +%% +%% +%% +%% Available package options (e.g., \usepackage[retainorgcmds]{IEEEtrantools} +%% +%% retainorgcmds +%% Prevents IEEEtrantools from overriding existing LaTeX commands. +%% Currently, the only effect is to preserve the original definitions +%% of itemize, enumerate and description. The IEEEtran versions are +%% always available as IEEEitemize, IEEEenumerate and IEEEdescription. +%% +%%******* +% 11/2002 V1.1 (v1.6b of IEEEtran.cls) changes: +% +% 1) In addition to the IEEE IED lists, the original LaTeX IED style list +% environments are now preserved as LaTeXitemize, LaTeXenumerate, and +% LaTeXdescription. Also, users can now redefine \makelabel within +% IEEE IED list controls. There may be some use for these in specialized +% applications. Thanks to Eli Barzilay for suggesting this feature. +% +%%********************************************************************** + + +\ProvidesPackage{IEEEtrantools}[2002/11/18 revision V1.1 by Michael Shell] +\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtrantools_doc.txt" manual for usage information.} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + + +% If IEEEtran.cls is detected, error. +{\@ifundefined{IEEEtransversionmajor}{\relax}{% +\PackageError{IEEEtrantools}{IEEEtrantools is not for use with the\MessageBreak + IEEEtran class}% + {Do not load IEEEtrantools - you don't need it.}% +}} + + +% define new needed flags to indicate document options +% and set a few "failsafe" defaults +\newif\if@retainorgcmds +\global\@retainorgcmdsfalse + + + +% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers +% dimen +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +% count +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% token list +\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA + + +% declare the options +\DeclareOption{retainorgcmds}{\@retainorgcmdstrue} + +% get and process any supplied options +\ProcessOptions + + + +% store the normalsize baselineskip +\newskip\normalsizebaselineskip +{\normalsize \global\normalsizebaselineskip\baselineskip\relax} +% store the nominal value of jot +\newskip\normaljot +\normaljot\jot\relax + + + + + +% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls +% *************************** +% +% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by +% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right +% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal +% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use +% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications +% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. +% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose +% which one you like in your document using a command such as: +% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA +\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent + +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB +\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent +% However, we'll default to using \parindent +% which makes more sense to me +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent +\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA + + +% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent +\IEEEelabelindent \parindent + +% This controls the default amount the description list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent +\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent + +% This is the value actually used within the IED lists. +% The IED environments automatically set its value to +% one of the three values above, so global changes do +% not have any effect +\newdimen\labelindent +\labelindent \parindent + +% The actual amount labels will be indented is +% \labelindent multiplied by the factor below +% corresponding to the level of nesting depth +% This provides a means by which the user can +% alter the effective \labelindent for deeper +% levels +% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" +% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific +% circumstances. +% The first list level almost always has full indention. +% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation +% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing +% that they don't use any indentation. +\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} + +% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto +% set to one of the 6 values above +% global changes here have no effect +\def\labelindentfactor{1.0} + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for +% the labels. +\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep +\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for +% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the +% spacing in these cases +\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em + +% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and +% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing +% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. +\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep +\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt + + +% This command is executed within each IED list environment +% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the +% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing +% global parameters that affect things other than lists. +% i.e., renewcommand{\iedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} +% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until +% \iedlistdecl is redefined. +\def\iedlistdecl{\relax} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based +% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \labelindent +% Usage: \calcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} +% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: +% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\calcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the +% width of the given text. It is the same as +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} +% and useful as a shorter alternative. +% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width +% of the longest label in the list +\def\setlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} + +% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the +% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal +% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via +% the \iedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments. +\def\usemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} + +% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically +% calculate \leftmargin from \labelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep +% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin +% This flag must be set (\nocalcleftmargintrue or \nocalcleftmarginfalse) +% via the \iedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifnocalcleftmargin +\nocalcleftmarginfalse + +% A flag which controls whether \labelindent is multiplied by +% the \labelindentfactor for each list level. +% This flag must be set via the \iedlistdecl or within the option +% of the IED list environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifnolabelindentfactor +\nolabelindentfactorfalse + + +% internal variable to indicate type of IED label +% justification +% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right +\def\@iedjustify{0} + + +% commands to allow the user to control IED +% label justifications. Use these commands within +% the IED environment option or in the \iedlistdecl +% Note that changing the normal list justifications +% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! +% I include these commands as they may be helpful to +% those who are using these enhanced list controls for +% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. +% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right +% justification, description defaults to left. +\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\def\@iedjustify{0}}%left +\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\def\@iedjustify{1}}%center +\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\def\@iedjustify{2}}%right + + + + +% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies +% this allows us to set all the list parameters within +% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) +% from overriding any of our parameters +% use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} + +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% +\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% +\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% +\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% +\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% +\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% +\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% +\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% +\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% +\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} + + +% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments +% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description +% which must be created by the base classes +% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate +\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize +\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize +\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate +\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate +% base class should define \description +\let\LaTeXdescription\description +\let\endLaTeXdescription\enddescription + + +% override LaTeX's default IED lists, unless the user requested they be retained +\if@retainorgcmds\relax\else +\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\description{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} +\fi + + +% provide the user with the IEEE IED commands +\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + + +% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal +% commands so they are protected against redefinition +\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} +\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% + \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\labelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@iedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \nocalcleftmarginfalse% + \nolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \labelindent\IEEEilabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % the user can override this later if + % they specified a \labelwidth + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \iedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\labelindent=\labelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \labelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\calcleftmargin{\labelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% + \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\labelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@iedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \nocalcleftmarginfalse% + \nolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \labelindent\IEEEelabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using + % normalfont 1) to 9) + % The user can override this later + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \iedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\labelindent=\labelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \labelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\calcleftmargin{\labelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + % get the labelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\labelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@iedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \nocalcleftmarginfalse% + \nolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \labelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% + % assume normal labelsep + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % Bogus label width in case the user forgets + % to set it. + % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you + % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to + % display it on the screen during compilation + % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out + % which label is the widest) + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \iedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent + \ifnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\labelindent=\labelindentfactor\labelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \labelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\calcleftmargin{\labelindent}\relax% + \fi}\fi} + +% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. +\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@iedjustify 0\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else +\if\@iedjustify 1\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else +\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} + + + + + +% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may +% have their own, different, implementations +\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] + +% e.g., "1a" (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) +\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} +% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum +\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) +% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray +\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) + + + + +%% +%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% +%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX +%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, +%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, +%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. +%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) + + +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\PackageError{IEEEtran}} + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form +\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse + +\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter +% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray +% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both +\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue + +\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined +\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used + + +% The default math style used by the columns +\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} +% The default text style used by the columns +% default to using the current font +\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} + +% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} + +% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber +% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package +% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as +% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. +\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} +\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} + + +\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% +\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} + +% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation +\newif\if@IEEEissubequation% +\@IEEEissubequationfalse + +% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers +\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} + +% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments +% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the +% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} +\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% +% check if column is defined +\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% +\else% if not, error and use default type +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% +\fi% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} + +% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} + + +% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} + + +% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} + + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types + + +% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list +% used to build up the \halign preamble +\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% +\@@IEEEappendtoksA} + +% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument +% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register +\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% +\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% +\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} + +% define some common column types for the user +% math +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} +% text +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} + +% vertical rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% +{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} + +% horizontal rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} + +% plain +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} + +% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} + + +% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} +% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} + +% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column +% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + + + +% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell +% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] +% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. +\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + + +% draws a single rule across all the columns optional +% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] +\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule +% turn off any struts +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + + + +% inserts a full row's worth of &'s +% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns +% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% +\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all +\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% +\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count +\repeat% +\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s +} + + + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines +\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used + + + +% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% save values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} + +% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} + + +% globally restores the strut height and depth to the +% master values and sets the master strut flag to true +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} + + +% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current +% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth +% and the use master strut flag, global +% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried +% into the isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height +% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside +% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut +% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut +% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip +% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height +% and depth to both the master and local struts. +% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth +% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use +% of the local strut values. +% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip0=0pt\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip2=0pt\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local and master strut sizes +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% allow user a way to see the struts +\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts +\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse + +% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +\else% +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +% allow user to see struts if desired +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} + + +% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray +% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. +% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 +\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} +\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip0=#1\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip2=#2\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} + + +% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the +% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% +\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} + + + +\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} +\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + + +% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. +% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} +\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% + % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not + % the star form was involked + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse + \else% not the star form + \global\@eqnswtrue + \fi% if star form + \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations + \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\normaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet + \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label + \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % put in the column for the equation number + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the isolation column + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the equation number col to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% + % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the display alignment + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use +% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, +% restore counters to correct values and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% +\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% +\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% +$$\@ignoretrue} + +% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation +\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% +\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse + +% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column +% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column + {\ifnum0=`}\fi + \@ifstar{% + \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }{% + \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }% +} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% + \ifnum0=`{\fi}% + \@@IEEEeqnarraycr + \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% + +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak + environment}% + {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak + specifications.}\relax% + \else + \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count + \repeat + % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column + \fi + % execute the &'s + \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% + % handle the strut/isolation column + \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray + &% and enter the equation number column + % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the + % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was + \if@eqnsw% + \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% + \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter + \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% + \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% + \fi% + % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers + \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi + \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag + % reset the number of columns the user actually used + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax + % the real end of the line + \cr} + + + + + +% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything +% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second +% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, +% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox +% within an hbox. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within +% a \hbox{$ $} construct. +% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. +% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - +% natural width is the default. +% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} +% for \vcenter in non-math mode +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} + +% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs +\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax% + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\normaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing + \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % add the isolation column to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the alignment + \everycr{}% + % use only the very first token to determine the positioning + % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, + % but is probably not worth the effort + % \noindent is used as a delimiter + \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% + \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent + % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded + % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now + \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% + % use the appropriate vbox type + \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% + \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% + \bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, +% exit from math mode if needed, and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values +% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray +% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\crcr\egroup\egroup% +% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed +\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} + + + +% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column +% carry strut status into isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +{\ifnum0=`}\fi% +\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} + +% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% +\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% starts the halign preamble build +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start +\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known +% ensure these are valid +\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition +% currently acquired numerically referenced glue +% use a name that is easier to remember +\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0% +% tracks number of columns in the preamble +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% +% record the default end glues +\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% +\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% +% now parse the user's column specifications +\@@IEEEbuildpreamble} + + +% parses and builds the halign preamble +\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% +% use only the very first token to check the end +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% +% identify current and next token type +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next +% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% +% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% +% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% +% process the acquired glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% +% process the acquired col +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% +% ready prevtype for next col spec. +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% +% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group +\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} + + +% executed just after preamble build is completed +% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue +\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% +{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% +\fi%num cols less than 1 +%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} + + +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded +% n = number +% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) +% c = letter +% e = \end +% u = undefined +% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise +\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else +\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences +\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else +\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +\if#2u\relax +\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% +{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak +as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} + + +% identify the current letter referenced column +% if invalid, use a default column +\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} + + +% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value +\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% +% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) +% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) +% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) +% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) +% ' = \quad 1em +% " = \qquad 2em +% . = 0.5\arraycolsep +% / = \arraycolsep +% ? = 2\arraycolsep +% * = 1fil +% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter +% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero +% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 +% value for 1em. +% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text +% \noindent is used as a delimiter here +\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% +\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent +% get the math font 1em value +% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs +% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. +% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure +% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, +% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. +% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. +{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% +% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% +% identify the glue value based on the first token +% we discard anything after the first +\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else +\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else +\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else +\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else +\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak +IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + + + +% process a numerical digit from the column specification +% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value +% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired +\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% +\else% if we previously aborted a glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion +\else%acquire this number +% save the previous type before the numerical digits started +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% +\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% +\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% +\else%user glue not defined +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak +\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\fi% glue defined or not +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition +\fi%close acquisition, get glue +\fi%discard or acquire number +\fi%prevtype glue or not +} + + +% process an acquired glue +% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions +\else +% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else +% as this is not used in the preamble, but before +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\else%not the start glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\else% not a back to back glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak +type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak +specifier}% +{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak +between column types.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\fi% previous was a column +\fi% back-to-back glues +\fi% is start column glue +\fi% prev type not a +} + + +% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else +% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) +% so we must add this column to the preamble now +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\fi%next type not numeral +\fi%next type not glue +} + + +%% +%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS +%% + + + + + + + + + +% \PARstart +% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the +% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter +% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the +% first word which will be rendered in upper case. +% +% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. +% For IEEEtrantools, we do not use a "@" in the names as these are user +% alterable controls. +% +% +% the number of lines that are indented to clear it +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES}{2} +% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@PARstart +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES}{2} +% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline +% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum +% of this value and the height of a capital "T" in the current +% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip +% so that it can respond to changes therein. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}{1.1\baselineskip} +% This is the separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. +% Lengths that depend on the font (i.e., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced +% to the font that is active when PARstart is called. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartSEP}{0.15em} + + +% definition of \PARstart +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES +% +% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use +% of \PARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter +% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second +% argument is the rest of the first word(s). +\def\PARstart#1#2{\par{% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% on a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% +% calculate the desired height of the big letter +% it extends from the top of a capital "T" in the current font +% down to \IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{T}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% +% extract the name of the current font in bold +% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME +\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% +{\bfseries% +\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% +\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}% +% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired +% height of the drop letter +\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% +% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\MakeUppercase{#1}}% +% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the +% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% +\typeout{** WARNING: PARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% +\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% +\fi% +% and store it as a counter +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital +% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, +% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA +% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer +% division. Hence the use of the counters. +% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will +% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% +% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by +% floating point values +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the +% big letter. +\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the +% hanging indent +\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont\MakeUppercase{#1}}}% +% end of the isolated calculation environment +% add in the extra clearance we want +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartSEP% +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the +% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use +% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command +% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other +% text won't be displaced by it. +\noindent\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\hangafter=-\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% +\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\raisebox{-\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEPARstartfont\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\MakeUppercase{#2}} + + +% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater +% than the specified space of argument one +% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) +% and issue a \newpage +% +% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} +% +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau +% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, +% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine +% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead +\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left +\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% +\newpage% +\fi\endgroup} + + + + +% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. +\providecommand{\bstctlcite}[1]{\@bsphack + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% + \@esphack} + + + + +\endinput +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtrantools.sty %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% That's all folks! + |